Casio | EX-TR60 | User manual | Casio EX-TR60 دليل الاستخدام

Casio EX-TR60 دليل الاستخدام
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪http://www.exilim.com/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-150‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬
‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻀﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺰﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‪3.............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪12 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪14 .........................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪14 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪15 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪16 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪17 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪19 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪19 ................................................................. .‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪19 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪21 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪26 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪28 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪28 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪29 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪30 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪31 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪32 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪32 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪33 .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪35 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪36 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪38 ................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪40 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) .....................................................‬ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪41 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪42 ......(Art Shot) .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪) .............................................................‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪44 ......(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ‪45 ......(Make-up)...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪46 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ‪47 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪48 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪49 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) ......................................................................LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‪52 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫❚❙‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪54 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) ...............................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪55 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪56 .....(HDR) .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪) .............................‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪56 .....(HS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪) ..........‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪57 .....(HS‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪58 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ‪) .................................................‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‪59 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪) ....................................................................‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ(‪60 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) ..................................................................‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪61 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) ....................................................................... LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‪61 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪62 ......‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) .........................................................‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪63 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) ...................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪63 ......‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪64 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪65 ..... (ISO) ........................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪) .........................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪66 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪)....................................................................‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‪67 ......‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪68 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪68 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) .........................................................‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪70 ......‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪71 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪71 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪72 ..................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪74 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ‪) .................................................‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‪75 ......‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ ‪).................................................................‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ(‪75 ......‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .......................................................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪77 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) ................................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪78 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‪) .....................................................‬ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪78 ......‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪) .....................‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪80 ......‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪) ........................................................................‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪81 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ..................................................................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪82 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪) ......................................................................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪82 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪) ..............................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‪83 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪84 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪86 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪87 ........................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪88 .......................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪89 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ..........‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪91 .....‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪)........‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪91 .....‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) .......................................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪92 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪93 .......................................................................‬‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ................................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ(‪93 ......‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪) ............................‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪94 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) .............‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪95 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) ......................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪95 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪) ...........................‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪95 ......(WLAN‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) ..................................................‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ(‪96 ......‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪97 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪98 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪98 ........................................................ Windows‬‬
‫❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪99 ....................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪101 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪102 ...................................................................... Macintosh‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪102 ...............................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪104 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪105 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪106 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪107‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ................................................................‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪107 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪) ................................................................‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪107 ...‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪).............................................................................‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪108 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪108 ...‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪109 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‪110 ...‬‬
‫❚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ‪110 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪110 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪).........................................................................‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‪111 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪111 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪112 ...(Language) ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪112 ...(HDMI) .......................................................HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪) .................................................‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪113 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪113 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) ..........................‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪113 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ....................................‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(‪114 ...‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪115 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪122 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪135 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪135 .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪136 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ‪136 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪137 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪138 .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪140 .....................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪140 .............................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪144 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪145 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪147 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪) [HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(72‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 17‬ﻭ‪(51‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bn bm‬‬
‫‪ [HDMI] 7‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(72‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ]‪[USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 21‬ﻭ‪ 24‬ﻭ‪99‬‬
‫ﻭ‪(103‬‬
‫‪) [p] 9‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 9‬ﻭ‪ 17‬ﻭ‪(107‬‬
‫‪ bn‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 19‬ﻭ‪ 59‬ﻭ‪(75‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 22‬ﻭ‪ 25‬ﻭ‪ 31‬ﻭ‪(33‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 29‬ﻭ‪(137‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [OPEN‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 19‬ﻭ‪(29‬‬
‫‪br‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪cl‬‬
‫‪ck‬‬
‫‪bt‬‬
‫‪bs‬‬
‫‪br‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪cp co cn cm‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(59 ،19‬‬
‫‪ bn‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(145‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(145‬‬
‫‪ “ ” bp‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 34‬ﻭ‪(49‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪(111‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) Bluetooth Smart‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(89‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(94‬‬
‫‪ cl‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(90‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(93‬‬
‫‪ cm‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬
‫‪ cn‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫‪ co‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(86‬‬
‫‪ cp‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫‪bo bn bm bl‬‬
‫‪(31‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(66‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(109‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(62‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 49‬ﻭ‪(63‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪2 34‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 49‬ﻭ‪(63‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 50‬ﻭ‪(145‬‬
‫‪ “ ” 5‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 34‬ﻭ‪(50‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪12 3 4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪bt bs br‬‬
‫‪ck‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(71‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪) Make-up bk‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬
‫‪ bn‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) Bluetooth Smart‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(89‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(94‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(90‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(93‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(74‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 86‬ﻭ‪(92‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(81‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(105‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(62‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(75 ،19‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪(111‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(105‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :100-0023 :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“100CASIO‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪12 3 4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(81‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(105‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 49‬ﻭ‪(63‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪(111‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(71‬‬
‫‪ “ ” 8‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 45‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 17‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 48‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 41‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 42‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 77‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 84‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٢٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻜﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻢ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻤﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻢ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “μ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ”ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ (75 ،59‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ًﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-150‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [OPEN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫]‪[OPEN‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪CASIO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (14‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ١٤٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (135‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ١٧٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(135‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪) ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (NP-150‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 149‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) “(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(112‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (18‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٦ ،‬‬
‫‪16/7/10‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫‪10/7/16‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪7/10/16‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ ٢٤/١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ ٢٤/١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪112‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪111‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.145‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪microSD‬‬
‫‪microSDHC‬‬
‫‪microSDXC‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪.٢٠١٥‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDXC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﺤﻘﻘﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[OPEN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[OPEN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (28‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ًَ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﺊ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫“‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫”‬
‫“‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫“‬
‫” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) “ ”/‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(40‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ )ﻭﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ( ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(47‬‬
‫– )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪) +‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 49‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫”‬
‫” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬‬
‫“ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 62‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (67‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(58‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪“.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪ ،“Š‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.68‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (67‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.“.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(67‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪54321‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪*(58‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(86‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(31‬‬
‫‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬
‫‪Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ Make-up‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ“ ﻣﻦ ”ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﺻﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (56‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺷﺎﻋﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.(Art Shot) “C‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﻭ” “ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪.“ART‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ،HDR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Art Shot‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪) Make-up‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪًﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪(Make-up‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.(Make-up‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ )‪.(Make-up‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﻴﻢ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﻭ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪“6+‬‬
‫”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،“Make-up‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “+6‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.“Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫– ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫– ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪HS‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 40‬ﻭ‪.(53‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )‪.(Make-up‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﻭ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ‪“6+‬‬
‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ”‪ “+‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ”–“ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻬﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫”‬
‫”‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﻗﻠﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪SR‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺿﻢ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪ “Ù‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(62‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪12M‬‬
‫‪1.5X‬‬
‫‪4.0X‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪2.9X‬‬
‫‪7.8X‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ” “ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫” “ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫– ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪ ،HS‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪ ،HS‬ﻃﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪Full HD‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ‪ .(Full HD) ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ‬
‫‪.٩:١٦‬‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪HS240‬‬
‫‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ .(HD‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ ‪.٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”‪ “Full HD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “HD‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ”‪“o‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭ”‪ .“R‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “Full HD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ “HD‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(47‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(66‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬‬
‫” “ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ‪ .HD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎً ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ‪.HD‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(47‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪) SR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (47‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫“ )ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻣﺆﺷﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪ ،HDR ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪HS‬‬
‫– ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ”‪.(BEST SHOT) “b‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ .BEST SHOT‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”‪ “HS240‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪ ،HS‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪ ،HS‬ﻃﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “1‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “1‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.“2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ”‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‬
‫“ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬
‫“ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ” “ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ” “ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٦‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪) “HDR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪(HS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪ ،“HS‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ً‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪(HS‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ً‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ “ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ١:١‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺮﺑﻊ“ ﻟﻔﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 62‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫– ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬
‫– ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 52‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪12M‬‬
‫)‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫"‪5"×3.5‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٢) 12M‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “3:2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،٢:٣‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(59‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ”ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ“ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٩٧٦x٢٩٧٦) 8M 3 12M‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ١٥٣٦x١٥٣٦) 2M 3 3M‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ”ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ“‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻀﺤﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ (L‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪x‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.145‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.145‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.82‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.49‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+ 2.0 EV‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3 EV :‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0.0‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.(“0.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ ¤‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫' ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫“ ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫† ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫– ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫« ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫· ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”· ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ )ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ISO 3 MENU 3 REC‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫‪ISO 80‬‬
‫‪ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ISO 200‬‬
‫‪ISO 400‬‬
‫‪ISO 800‬‬
‫‪ISO 1600‬‬
‫‪ISO 3200‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٢ 9‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( )ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫‪) PF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ*‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ*‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٥٢‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪.(AE‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 REC‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،“1‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“6‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “6‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”{“ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ ”}“ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“6‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “n‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “z‬ﺃﻭ ”‪.“y‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”~“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”~“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫¡ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ¢‬ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻗﺺ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺩﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”]“ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫– ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫– ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫– ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.8X‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (18‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (18‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ُﻇﻔﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫]‪[HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً(‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.112‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺄﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ“ ﻭ”ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ“ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﻣﻤﻜﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ“ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ“‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.3M‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ ﺃﻭ ”‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ ﻭﺳﻤﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”‬
‫”‬
‫“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫“ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ )ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺣﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻲء( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺣﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻓﻴﻊ‬
‫‚‬
‫ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻟﻘﺺ ﻫﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (78‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”–“ )ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪) “+” ،‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”›“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”›“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ”›“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(113‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪ 3M :‬ﻭ‪.VGA‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ،٣:٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻲ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣:٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ١:١‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﻤﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth® Smart‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth low energy‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫”‪ .“EXILIM Connect‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ً .(MOV‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪http://www.exilim.com/manual/‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.Adobe Reader‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﺑﻠﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬
‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(93‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪.(91‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪.App Store‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“Google Play‬‬
‫‪(iOS) iPhone .‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“App Store‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth low energy‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(90‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪.“Pairing‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth low energy‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ”‪ “SSID:‬ﻭ”‪:‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ“ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪SSID‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ “.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.URL‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ “.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ URL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺧﺮﻭﺝ“ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪URL‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‪ “4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ(‬
‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﻼ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .Bluetooth low energy‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪X :‬‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪V :‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪ :iPhone‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ :Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(93‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪»T‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WLAN‬‬
‫”‬
‫“ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(96‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(89‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Bluetooth low energy‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪:iPhone‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ(‬
‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (99‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(102‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪) “File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ﺛﻢ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 99‬ﻭ‪.(102‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 101‬ﻭ‪.(104‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Windows‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ “Windows‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.98‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪ “Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.102‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ :‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ QuickTime 7‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.24‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(25‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪.“DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ ،“DCIM‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ :Windows Vista‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ“‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ .‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻣﻄﻔﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.106‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ،Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪:“HD” ،“Full HD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠ Core 2 Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪:“HS240‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢ Pentium 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪QuickTime 7 :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ OS X 10.5‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪QuickTime Player‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS X 10.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .10.4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS 10.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪) 10.10‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.24‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(25‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴُﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ( ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳُﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Mac OS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻣﻄﻔﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.106‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS X 10.5 :‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪) QuickTime Player :‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(106‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .CIMG9999‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪CIMG0 02 6.JPG‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫)‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100CASIO‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.999CASIO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٩٠٠‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 00 CASI O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.10‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)‪.Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪100CASIO‬‬
‫‪CIMG0001.JPG‬‬
‫‪CIMG0002.MOV‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪101CASIO‬‬
‫‪102CASIO‬‬
‫‪DCIM‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ُ .DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ .DCIM‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 106‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.58‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،+1‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪+1‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪–1‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (AE‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) (HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(72‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) (HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(72‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ”ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ“‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ٢٠١٦ ،‬ﻡ‪ ١:٢٥ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪2016/7/10‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪2016/7/10 1:25pm‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (111‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫”ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻔﻲ“‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫)ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪءﺍً ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (110‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (110‬ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ ٢٤/١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤/١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ٢٠١٦ ،‬ﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫‪16/7/10‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪10/7/16‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪7/10/16‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Language 3‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“Language‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪(HDMI) HDMI‬‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪HDMI 3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪*1080i‬‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫* ‪ 1080i‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،1080 60i‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻊ ‪ .1080 50i‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ PAL‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .1080i 60i‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ PAL‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.576p‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺸﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 138‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (93‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(‬
‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫!‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ )‪ (-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺧﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪...‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻑ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺸﻄﻔﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻄﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫"‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪%‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻭﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻨﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺸﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫– )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻔﻄﻪ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻬﻴﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬
‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﻘﻘﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﻤﻀﻤﻀﺔ ﻓﻤﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺷﻄﻒ ًﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪121‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(144‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٨٥‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫– ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪122‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (113‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/r-law/dc/‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ‪CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪124‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎً ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺮﻕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ microSDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8‬ﻭ ‪Windows 8.1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhoto‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Adobe‬ﻭ‪Reader‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe Systems Incorporated‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪.HDMI Licensing, LLC‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Android‬ﻭ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Google Inc.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ iOS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Cisco Systems, Inc.‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫• ‪The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. is under‬‬
‫‪license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ EXILIM‬ﻭ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪125‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬.
ً ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ‬
.‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
OpenVG 1.1 Reference Implementation
Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and /or associated documentation files
(the "Materials "), to deal in the Materials without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Materials,
and to permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials.
THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE MATERIALS OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS.
bluedroid 5.0.0_r2
Copyright (c) 2014 The Android Open Source Project
Copyright (C) 1998-2014 Broadcom Corporation
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
126
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
127
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
128
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
129
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
bluedroid 5.0.0_r2
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes)
is allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products
built using this software without specific written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties
in respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness
and/or fitness for purpose.
libhardware 5.0.0_r2
Copyright (c) 2005-2014, The Android Open Source Project
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
130
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
131
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and
132
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
133
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
134
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ .USB 2.0‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪135‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳُﻌﺰﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪ (NP-150‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪136‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 28‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(113‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CD-RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪137‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(113‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﻀﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪12M‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪Full HD‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪138‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪/ 3 :‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/ 3 :‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪3 :‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ T‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪WLAN‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪139‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-150‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(20‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪140‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪ (١ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ‪ .HDR‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ”ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ“ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ“ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ”ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ“ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺿﻮء ﻛﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪” BEST SHOT‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (53‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬
‫‪141‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(123‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪142‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(112‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ً‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪.(111‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(113‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.CASIO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪143‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(26‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(113‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٩٩٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗُﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪144‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(113‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠) 12M‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢*microSD‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫١٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢٢٨٦‬‬
‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٢٥‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٦٥٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣*(٢٩٧٦x٢٩٧٦) 8M‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٩٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠٤٨‬‬
‫‪٣*(١٥٣٦x١٥٣٦) 2M‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٩٩‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٨١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪٢*microSD‬‬
‫‪Full HD‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪ ٣٠) ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٩‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫‪HS240‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٠٦٫٥‬‬
‫ﻡﺏ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥٦‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨١٫٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ*‪٦‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠٫٠‬‬
‫ﻡ ﺏ*‪٦‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪ ٢٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬ﺝﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪145‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ*‪٦‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪٦‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٩٫٩‬ﻡ ﺏ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .(SanDisk Corporation‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .Full HD‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(51 ،28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪146‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ H.264/AVC ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ٤٩٫٩ :‬ﻡ ﺏ*(‬
‫‪microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫* ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M ،(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠) 12M‬‬
‫‪*(١٥٣٦x١٥٣٦) 2M ،*(٢٩٧٦x٢٩٧٦) 8M‬‬
‫* ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠ ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠) Full HD‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪ ٣٠ ٧٢٠x١٢٨٠) HD ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ ٣٨٤x٥١٢) HS240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ١١٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ CMOS :‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٫٧/١‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ١٢٫٧٦ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥٨ = f F2.8‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ٢١‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4.0X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 7.8X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(3M‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻻﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ٨ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ٨ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪9 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ‪ ١ :‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ –2.0 EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +2.0 EV‬ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ‪(1/3 EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ٢٠/١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪ ١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪F2.8‬‬
‫‪147‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 1600 ،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬
‫‪ ISO 3200‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪Bluetooth® Smart :‬‬
‫‪:Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n :‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪WPA2 :‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٣٫٠ TFT‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫‪ ٩٢١٦٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪Capacitive‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺤﻦ ‪،(USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪١ x (NP-150‬‬
‫‪148‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(Full HD‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(Full HD‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ٢٣ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) NP-150 :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ٩٥٠ :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
‫‪(SanDisk Corporation UHS-I‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪CASIO‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٤٫٢ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ١٢٦‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٦٤ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ١٤٫٦ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٦٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*(‬
‫‪ ١٤٦‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫* ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪149‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-150‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٩٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٣٤٫٢‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٣٩٫٨ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٦٫٩ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ٦٥٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٥٣‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٢١ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٤٥ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪150‬‬
.‫ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬FCC ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THIS UNIT IN THE
U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas).
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Proper connectors must be used for connection to host computer and/or
peripherals in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Caution Exposure to radio frequency radiation
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this device must not
be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
EX-TR60
Trade Name:
CASIO
Responsible party: Industrial Handheld Division
Casio America, Inc.
Address:
570 Mt. Pleasant Avenue, Dover, New Jersey 07801, USA
Telephone number: 973-361-5400
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
151
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
M29
MA1512-B
2015
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising